Home

Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. Wi Publication Order Forms 431 Traction Grades sse ee e 433 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades 0 434 Quality Grades i ssec t Ra 432 Treadwear 0 ena Eana 433 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 427 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our produ
2. B Tuc Chang ews asia ee ere Xu tea ees 318 Fuel System Cautlona o vuv cr RE vos 49 331 SHOW TRS saaa eee dw ERE EEY GE eee ass 318 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 332 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 318 Wl Adding Fuel 22 2 99 9 b n 332 H Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 319 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap sss 332 base System a eran e Rd pace e gx 322 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 334 Premium System If Equipped 34 W Vehicle Loading ceva eu ee cess 335 General Information 4 328 Vehicle Certification Label 335 H Fuel Requirements cessa eR ERES 328 W Trailer Towi g e 2 zieeex M dees user 337 Reformulated Gasoline ils 329 Common Towing Definitions 337 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 329 Trailer Hitch Classification 339 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 329 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer MMT In Gasoline LLL LLL LLL 330 Weight Ratings 2 0 0 0 0 e eee 340 Materials Added To Fuel 4 3 kn ui 381 en STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Trailer And Tongue Weight 341 MH Recreational Towing Towing Requirements 2 342 Behind Motorhome Etc lise 348 Towing Tips 1orpbpcepatberqer d i PERS 347 doyle Lime voce porma oes vas Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground cuve eben a cg i
3. Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training Cd phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous redial record again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
4. 369 Engine Oll seater ee hse Geta Rates 369 Engine Oil Filter s see 2040065 ee 372 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 372 Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication ie sess llle Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System iss e REA 376 Cooling System es eces less 378 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System censo vUa dice P XR ea e ed 384 W Bulb Replacement 5 s o e nn 398 Automatic Transaxle CVT 386 Headlamps eesse Rep re rg ale 398 Manual Transaxle llus 386 Fog Lights 2222s tere Rete 400 Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals And Backup Models Only 0 0 00 00000 387 Lights sic e aee Rena 400 Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD License Lights 5er Rye 401 MOSS DUM len MESA UE a Center High Mounted Stoplight 402 he petu TT Auxiliary Off Road Light oaaao 402 uses 2e LLL 394 Bl Fluids And Capacities lesse 404 Integrated Power Module IPM 394 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 405 H Vehicle Storage isis e Rn 397 PAGING Kos SPSS adora wed sia 408 Chassis os scare sero d auos Mes ae ups 406 la Replacement Bulbs 4 ccs
5. Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat To fold the front passenger seat lift the recliner handle to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion 030906209 Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Handle 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can be folded forward Pull the strap forward to move the seat forward and flat 030906211 Rear Seats Folded Flat Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped For additional comfort pull the strap forward just enough to release the seatback latch Then push the Folding Rear Seat seatback to a reclined position approximately 35 degrees maximum and release the strap ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel 031306200 Hood Release Lever 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 M
6. 183 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry NENNEN INDEX 447 Radial Ply Tires esas suis cae BRE 312 Radio Operation 0 0 e eee eee 242 Radio Satellite 0 0 0 0 cee eee 234 Rear Axle Differential 0 387 Rear Drive Assembly 000005 387 Rear Liftgate Sedan isses 34 Rear Seat Folding csse ee 120 Rear Window Defroster 0000085 158 Rear Window Features 00000000 157 Rear Wiper Washer 0 0000 e ee eee 157 Recorder Event Data 0 000000008 58 Recreational Towing siet tiite ritenia iass 348 Refrigerant ccc sited cen rem ediads gee EE 375 Reminder Seat Belt llle 46 Remote Control Door Locks 2 24 93 eR RR G3 99er 20 Security Alarm sese sr a 19 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 240 Replacement Bulbs 000000 397 Replacement Keys 0 00 00 c cece 17 Replacement Parts 368 Replacement Tires ess eer Ren 316 Reporting Safety Defects 0 430 Restraints Child lees 60 66 Restraints Infant llle 61 Restraints Occupant asses n e 36 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 155 Roll Over Warning exem ere yet EY 4 Roof Type Carrier Sirac ees er wa ee a 159 Rotation Tires llle 318 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 69 Safety Checks Outside Vehi
7. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 8179114 2 Set the parking brake Spare Tire and Jack Stowage 3 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis Spare Tire Stowage sion or REVERSE manual transmission The spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the 4 Turn OFF the ignition cargo area 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WARNING Continued 6 Block both the front and rear of the Always park on a firm level surface as far from wheel diagonally opposite the jacking the edge of the roadway as possible before raising position For example if changing the the vehicle right front tire block the left rear wheel Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic hicl transmission in PARK a manual transmission in NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle REVERSE while the velucteds being jacked Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a Jacking Instructions jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a WARNING jack Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to Do not get ander the vehicle when itd Dua jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle durin
8. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the UConnect These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are transferred and updated to UConnect on the next phone connection 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via B
9. power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watt AC power inverter is located on the rear of the center console for added convenience The power inverter can be used to power cell phones elec tronics and other low power devices NOTE Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC 150 Watt maximum power rating is exceeded 115 Volt Power Outlet 035006145 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e Do not use a three prong adaptor power from the vehicle s battery even when not in Do not insert any objects into the receptacles use ie cellular phones etc Eventually
10. 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate
11. Air Filtration System If Equipped An air filter is included in the optional Security Group Filter media includes a particle filtration layer The filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts only on air coming from outside the vehicle it does not filter air inside the passenger com partment See the maintenance schedule for the filter change interval The air filter change interval coincides with engine oil and filter change intervals As with oil changes the interval is shorter for heavy duty service or dusty conditions See your authorized dealer for service 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SS Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle Set the Fan control to the high position AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS full clockwise Press the 4 button Set the Mode control at or between VERY HOT L and 24 Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed 4 from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 7J and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near Z2 COOL OR COLD If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and f then turn the air NIE CONDITIONS cond
12. Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD pl
13. If Equipped 5 Speed Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds Downshifting ll Automatic Transaxle If Equipped Brake Transmission Interlock System Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock DYSON o vin od bits Ge ed e ep Sate dents Gear Ranges uas resseta SOR AER CR E eats 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME lal AutoStick If Equipped 264 When To Use Low L Off Road With The OperatiOn c creer e aie ae dE ae nl ao 264 OVE Toes LOVET EMGAGE vasdag Sama S General Informatii s sets sei ephe tesa 265 e ida cae DE EM 271 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped 266 Diving In Sow Mud And Gand 244 cen 271 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces 266 Crossing Obstacl s Bada And Gier High Acceleration 0 0 0 0 0 c eee eee 266 Points desde ea Ha Re EET 273 Traction se estes aie Reine dones 267 Ell Climbing 3 2 exce x xen uis 276 Bl Driving Through Water 4 267 Driving Through Water 278 Flowing Rising Water 268 Airing Down For Off Road Driving 281 Shallow Standing Water 268 Nehicle Recovery zie xh eee E44 282 H On Road Driving Tips 0 0 270 After Driving Off Road 284 ll Off Road Driving Tips 4 270 W Po
14. Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc AM FM CD DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Multimedia system REN or Navigation RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to V
15. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION i t o6 im 9e og noe uim iis o cR Use 9 8 9 SUR RC R UR EEADERS E own 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE cecccecccccccccccceccce 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee mnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee eeeee eee hh n nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc eer cece reece were were eee e eee eee mnn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 0 ccc cece ccc ccc c cece cece hh hh hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4435939459999 359949 v 9e vy STE OCTET OCTETS 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ccc cccc ccc creer ee nn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece cece cc cere cere cece hh hh hh 10 INDEX 4 93 239654 9 31 E ESI eR QUY aides sh o3 siseste SHG ar sales KURIER ae P9 us Information Provided by DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS MiIntroduction osser ce eee 4 Warnings And Cautions 0 7 H Rollover Warning c00 04 Rr 4 Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manual 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION BEEN INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these
16. Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 340 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note 1 2 0L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L Auto Man with 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Trailer Tow Prep Pack age AHC Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in this section Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of control of
17. WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys 12 Ignition Key Removal 12 Locking Doors With The Key 15 Key In Ignition Reminder i 15 H Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped 15 To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 15 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 15 W Sentry Key 2 citi cca bitassoasabrawvsss 16 Replacement Keys 0 00 0000 17 Customer Key Programming 18 General Information 000 19 lll Vehicle Security Alarm System If Equipped 19 To Set The Security Alarm 19 To Disarm The System seeto oi tassas mins 20 Vehicle Security Alarm System Manual Override see e ac ee aces 20 ll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 20 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 21 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Remote Key Unlock Driver Door AIl First Child Protection Door Lock System Rear lo E 21 Doors If Equipped 31
18. pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 WARNING 20 Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or shift lever selection others could be badly burned by steam or boiling TE Y ly the brak fore shifting f coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer 2 CILE ABDI Meigs Memes HOUR PARK ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 21 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool Press this button to change the display from odometer to ing System Pressure Cap paragraph either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and 18 Cruise Indicator If Equipped hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer CRUISE his indicator shows that the Speed Control to 0 miles 0 km The odometer must be in Trip mode to System is ON reset 19 Cruise SET Indicator If Equipped 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is Each tire including t
19. 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system Programming Additional Transmitters For more information refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming procedure in this section of the manual General Information This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 2 This device must accept any interferenc
20. Jeep PATRIOT 2009 owner s manual VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution there fore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler LLC e Copyright O 2008 Chrysler LLC
21. Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a ood Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 411 gt Z l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se a I M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule N Service Schedule 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter fW Change the engine oil and engine oil J Rotate tires N filter LJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the ME Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary E J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Q Replace the air conditioning filter P 8 S LJ Inspect the CV joints C Inspect exhaust system E J Inspect the front s
22. en STARTING AND OPERATING 307 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your and number and size of occupants This table is for trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for manual to determine how this reduces the available the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle cargo and eben be Toad capacity of your venice e For the following example the combined weight of NOTE occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs e The following table shows examples on how to calcu 392 kg late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 lbs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire failure Ov
23. 0 168 Instrument Cluster llle seen 123 LICENSE oie soa ead eaten ee es a ye 401 Lights On Reminder 004 124 Low Puel senner tataa S a aaea a eae esa 168 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 176 Map Reading 0 0 eee eee 129 Off Road roeren 494 fivarie se web E 127 Oil Pressure sees 168 Seat Belt Reminder lessen 169 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 20 172 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 172 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 173 Traction Control areas a miai sagans a a daie aih a 297 TumiSignal 24h ese n 123 126 400 Voltage grs smt Rhe ss os ense tel eai 167 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 167 Loading Vehicle iiie 335 336 Capacities cu acs e n eae PEE RE E Pea 336 jl p ses aves Mah Svkgh ahah Sa OS hear e Beae 305 Locks Child Protection 0000002 e eae 31 DOOf e326 kerei bed de tee Gane d o EQ 26 Power DOOf 4 cicer ERES d rp 27 Steering Wheel s sesi 2250 5 i E 50044044 sis 15 Lubrication Body llle 375 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 0 159 Lumbar Support 0 0 0 naa 116 Maintenance Free Battery 04 373 Maintenance General 0 0000 e eee 369 Maintenance Procedures 0 055 369 NENNEN INDEX 445 Maintenance Schedule LL 408 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine hk RR RR promieni 176 367 Manual Servi
24. 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 6 8 Liters ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Oil Filter P N 04884900AB or equivalent Spark Plugs ZFR5F 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transaxle CVT MOPAR CVTF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transaxle MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear Drive Assembly RDA MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Power Transfer Unit PTU MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent non synthetic product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids or equivalent Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 or ATF 4 Automatic Transmission
25. 371 Recommendation LL 370 404 Synthetic So sce de e hg Tete e OR E E 371 VISCOSITY sever LX Resa e d Ps ade koe dor s 371 Onboard Diagnostic System 366 367 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 136 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Outside Air Intake 0 000 000 0 ee 249 OVerd rive ea E ces aov eee wih pace wits 264 Overheating Engine 122 045 4e base tes 172 350 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 431 Paint Cate osse cee eee E p esa as 388 Panic Alarm 2004 6 cee RR RD 24 Parking Drake aede Ry eere Een 287 Passing Eight ds eer ose Ae E Y x 127 Personal Settings llle 183 POTS qug iari e ea ca e o Rechner e e ar 68 Phone Cellular seen 81 Phone Hands Free UConnect 81 Placard Tire and Loading Information 305 Power Door LOCKS 244 4448 2044 94 40 PERDERE he bs 27 MATOS sega pans dede orc hae Sarde a 79 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 146 Oteeritig sca ahaha Sew waka gy dre SOROR aes 286 OUDEIOOL 213 4t bao pubE ate nea ed n tud 143 Transfer Unit llle 388 MindOoWSo s 3v em E ht ee EX AD ede DES 32 Power Steering Fluid 004 406 Power Transfer Unit 00000000 388 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 48 Preparation for Jacking 00 353 Pretensioners Seat Bell serce rendien e EE A 46 Programmable Electronic Features
26. Failure to following this warning could result in an accident SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID A
27. Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 408 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 408 COMmreoemMm zon mMo2Zzr2zamazZz reZz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be
28. Jump Starting 6 2 eee eee 358 TOWING acceso i Prey gere SAG Ge eS 361 Emission Control System Maintenance 367 408 Engin es cem eae aS ad ox waa sane ee gs 365 Break In Recommendations 68 Checking Oil Level 1 22 tes 369 COOS a x geo aeta maea I d RR apes 378 Exhaust Gas Caution 000000005 332 Fuel Requirements 0 05 328 Jump Staring 56er us ee ak eek 358 Oll si ees ceed idni niti Cee RSRES 369 404 405 Oil Change Interval lessen 370 Oil Filler Cap i c see eR 365 371 Oil Filter 4 2 sa dace Resp REGE S 405 Oil Selection sss R3 R s 370 Oil Syntheti sosecnelio c y e Re a 371 Overheating 2s e m eas 350 Temperature Gauge 00 02 0000 172 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 56 Event Data Recorder 00000005 58 Exhaust Gas Caution 35 69 332 376 377 Exhaust System sa s descas a i macn nn 376 Fabrio Care essesi serep ame reg Eua E Sor 391 Filters Air Cleaner cessit e imat EnS ERER E 372 Engine Oll as 4400025 ee E REESE Edo 372 405 Flashers i cass eR aee Re Ro dea RR RC d 350 Hazard Warning isle Ei RE ptites 350 Tum Signal sesso asc hee eO GRE EA En 168 400 Flat TireStowage llle 357 Flooded Engine Starting 257 Filid BEER S vd 4as eae ae eos ra deena es 406 Fluid Capacities 6 0 404 Fluid Leaks vec RR RR babes CE 70 en INDEX 441 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Trans
29. Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never at tempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle down stream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Ne
30. Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pres sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or repl
31. coverage of the side glass 030406199 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated Hands Free Communication UConnect system Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for these ra dios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect system is Bluetooth Hands Free d
32. if Do not touch with wet hands plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will Close the lid whennot im usc discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an andlor prevent NEM staring electis shock and failure Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS There are also two cupholders located in the back for the Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders There are rear passengers two cupholders located in the front 035106215 1 035106214 Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 STORAGE To open the lower glove compartment pull outward on Glove Compartment And Storage Bin ibe melease andis Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment 035206143 Glove Compartment 1 Upper Storage Bin 2 Lower Glove Compartment 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Door Storage If Equipped
33. safety and prevent damage to your vehicle 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 CAUTION Continued WARNING Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc f
34. vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steer or under steer condition e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position es STARTING AND OPERATING 297 ESP Indicator Light The ESP Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active If the ESP Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING e Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions Continued WARNING Continued e ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must neve
35. 042005200 REQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipp
36. 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 0 0 0008 KR55S120123 Cariada ecu ee ae d 2671 S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide excellent fuel economy when using high quality regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 87 sarab 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended The use of premium gaso line will provide no benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle es STARTING AND O
37. 77 Advanced Phone Connectivity 99 Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped 78 Things You Should Know About Your Power Mirrors If Equipped 0 79 UConnect System sba ere o ker x a 100 Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 0 80 General Information 109 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x ll Voice Recognition System VR Folding Rear Seat 000000 120 It Bquipped s 3 250034 er Eee ae Guth ie Rea 109 Mi To Open And Close The Hood 121 ha a M Bus le esa ktater ERA a PERS 123 slag oe E i Multifunction Lever lesse 123 Voice Training 114 Headlights Parking Lights And Instrument Bal5 ts isses RR 114 Panel Lights 2 2245 Ex x REY 123 Front Seat Adjustment 114 Lights On Reminder 124 Manual Seat Height Adjustment Fog Lights If Equipped 124 If Equipped id nrbes 115 Daytime Running Lights DRL Manual Lumbar If Equipped 116 TE BQuipped ss sess reres oe aR ae Dee 125 Driver s Seatback Recline 116 Turm Signals usto anre omes 126 Adjustable Head Restraints 117 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 126 Heated Seats If Equipped 117 Elash lo Pass vse c eee nn eR je e 127 Fold Flat Front Passen
38. Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer WARNING to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Information Provided by DEALER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicle ace ees Ghee UR AR Se ERE 427 Speech Impaired TDD TIY 429 Prepare For The Appointment 427 Service Contract cead ee en 429 Prepare A EIsE 3 eek rede ede Che 427 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 430 Be Reasonable With Requests 427 W MOPAR Parts 0 0 00000 430 H If You Need Assistance lesse 427 WiReporting Safety Defects 430 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 428 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 428 eae nye ici ie d nq d Pus Phe as S In Mexico Contact 428 m Canadas soediiups sedbirpmiseg aie 426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M
39. Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Continued positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion Continued 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued WARNING e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To av
40. INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 80 F Nu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 819197c5 The EVIC consists of the following System status Vehicle information warning message displays Personal settings customer programmable features Compass heading Outside temperature display Trip computer functions UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped Audio mode display Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle not in PARK automatic transmissions or vehicle is in motion manual transmissions Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Gate Ajar with a singl
41. LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required fo
42. LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition switch cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transmission 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 2 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Locking Doors With The Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Body Lubrication under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will not function STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your manual transmission vehicle is equip
43. Lamp Aaa an NAE RPM RT EE p T578 indicates a problem in the circuit that must be Center Dome Lamp 000 essen T578 corrected Rear Cargo Flashlight 8 A35LF LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Bulb No VEHICLE STORAGE Low Beam High Beam Headlight H13 If you will not be using your vehicle for more than Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your Light 3157AK or 3157A battery Front Fog Light cides ovina hae eua 9145 VP Center High Mounted Stop Light e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution CHMSL eee LED Assembly Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw Rear Tail Turn Stop o acdc 40h eee he ERETS 3157 Backup Light 0000000 W16W 921 ee ECON ECE Ame Ne ape oe eae ae Light DE paese aes e act Been qs WsW QIf Road Light kee rece rd H3 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M BULB REPLACEMENT 2 Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out Hea dlamps at connector 1 Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the headlight MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 3 Remove the green connector from the back of the bulb 4 Twist the bulb to the left by pulling straight back 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Pull bulb outward from assembly Fog Lights VU I See your authorized dealer for replacement Tail Lights Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights 1 Remove the two push pins from the tai
44. N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM O O C OOC C O C 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415 00O OO O O O O O L 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Chang
45. NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and
46. Odometer Trip Odometer This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven Also the cluster will display replacing the odometer trip odometer vehicle warning messages such as door gate ajar g ASCAP loose gas cap Lo tlrE display toggles between Lo and tIrE when tire pressure is low and Change Oil message Loose gas cap gAS CAP will be displayed from the Odometer Trip Odom eter on all models NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instru ment cluster all warnings including door and gATE will only be displayed in the EVIC display For additional information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter If Equipped in this section U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil ch
47. On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors If Equipped Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 021806189 x Child Protection Door Lock Function IL 021806188 Child Protection Door Lock Location 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear
48. Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard
49. Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 ee
50. SE YE xe 348 256 STARTING AND OPERATING ME STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift lever in NEUTRAL NOTE e The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor e If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switc
51. Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you req
52. To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or down 81913b44 Dimmer Control Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the Low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on Low beam Selecting High beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The High beam lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights DRL at DRL intensity lower whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK 81c84c37 Front Fog Lights Control 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent 81c84
53. Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the
54. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names wn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension wn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA ext
55. VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition system allows you to we control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When you press the VR hard key you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR hard key listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR hard key while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the
56. When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see
57. You need proper knee impact protection in a e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket driving equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order t
58. a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate GI SINGLE Dine vra 042305232 RES Radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alter
59. a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 312 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
60. an authorized dealer 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Transmission Temperature Warning Light During sustained high speed driving on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission over heat indicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion 16 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 16 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 17 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H
61. and then inch the vehicle 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION e Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage e Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angl
62. another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Y 022606191 Pulling Out The Latch Plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the plate into the buckle until you hear a click A buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued 022606192 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your n abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger or the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis to
63. be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE butt
64. be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Performance is maximized under e It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook e low to medium blower setting dd P e Phonebook Downloaded and UConnect Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not e low road noise similar e low to medium vehicle speed e smooth road surface e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be e fully closed windows spoken eight zero zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing e Even though the system is designed for users
65. brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 346 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations z O O O 057003766 4 Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 1 Female
66. by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Assistance Last See Number Phonebook See Setup on Phone Flowchart Flowchart is redialed Francais UConnect Tutorial Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup loggle New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on oft override phone priorities All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
67. call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the r
68. dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid transmission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 3 Ba Mirrors i2 ose RR SERRE 75 i Hands Free Communication UConnect Inside Day Night Mirror 0 75 Pe EQUIDDed stewtaick reese yeah eui eye aires ot Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror Operati seess ci ves ca oe pde a seas 83 It Equipped regere cR ERR RR 76 Phone Call Features 0 00 0 91 Outside Mirror Driver s Side 77 UConnect System Features 94 Outside Mirror Passenger s Side
69. dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At
70. doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches 021906196 Power Window Switch Location The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows There are single window E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 controls on each passenger door trim panel which oper ate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Section 4 of this manual WARNING Never leave children in a ve
71. dyes to Continuously Variable Transaxle CVT Fluid CVTF 4 CVTF 4 is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Manual Transaxle Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more that 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole
72. emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system en STARTING AND OPERATING 335 VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B Pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Curb Weight The cu
73. exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use Low L Off Road with the 4WD Lock Lever Engaged When driving off road shift into low L Off Road and activate the 4WD LOCK This will provide additional traction and activates the numerous off road features to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the sustained lower gearing low L Off Road with 4WD Lock engaged will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range This will allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills with improved control and less effort Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simulta neous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving in Snow Mud and Sand There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave greater stopping distances 272 STARTING AND OPERATING Se and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant s
74. for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test ro
75. gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag is designed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC with side impact option detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all o
76. handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATI
77. hu 397 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L 2 4L 070305628 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Battery 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Integrated Power Module 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running seve
78. lees 427 Service Contract sss sex RR RR 429 Service Manuals ee eee 431 Setting the Clock 189 192 206 209 219 Settings Personal 2 0 0 00 cece 183 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 260 Shoulder Belts 0 0 0 0 0 0 cc cee ee eee 37 Side Airbag i e e t ces 55 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 250 Signals Turn gt an esas eee eee ee e eae 168 400 en INDEX 449 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 266 Snow Chains Tire Chains 318 Snow Tires ixierg4 gea bd head ETAGE 318 Spare r tesisi gud b oes Ge eas 312 313 353 Specifications CI Loretta puede RU E 370 Speed Control Cruise Control 134 173 Speedometer cress ssd esc eu a eed en 168 Starting DT 256 Automatic Transmission l i 256 Engine Fails to Start 05 257 Manual Transmission 256 Starting Procedures 0 0 0 iile 256 Steering POWE a3 hd eae ede Sa awe lan 286 Tilt Colum iiu 64 acne taeae ae css 133 Wheel Lock ues ya kd v3 ew aac 15 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 1 2 eee 240 SLOTABe on fae mead weds Ree ie Kane asd 151 397 otorage Din sso ka ae Ee ee RE RR RE E ER 151 Stuck Freeing os ievsk ep RENI RET 360 SUN ROOF sec ak Pee eee TES E P PY 143 Sun Visor Extension lt 6 6 les 80 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 48 synthetic Engine Oil sss e ean Ra 371 Tachomet
79. may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton amp with the corresponding number 1 6 where the 7 CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M
80. mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the brake warning indicator will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an
81. no can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your matter what the speed steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and 1st gear Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast ning the wheels is most effective may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continu ously for more than 30 seconds ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Automatic Transaxle e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground e All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles must be towed on a flatbed truck all four wheels off the ground CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result Manual Transaxle e Front Wheel Drive FWD or All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e FWD vehicles can be towed with the front or rear wheels elevated e FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground All Transaxles If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrost
82. nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais depend ing on availability As you continue the displayed infor mation will be shown in the selected language NOTE UConnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in the Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position automatic transmissions Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When DRIVER S DOOR IST is selected only the driv er s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button and requires a second press to unlock the remaining locked doors When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is se lected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK butto
83. not allow the tires to lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible man ner You should only drive through areas which are ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 CAUTION Water ingestion into the transaxle transfer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if some thing goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want to use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehic
84. phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should
85. pres sure value The system will automatically update the 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressure s have been re ceived The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting th
86. publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully A WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information S0bfeofo Rollover Warning Label Failur
87. scare we ar 153 Customer Assistance eee eee 427 Data Recorder Event 0 000000 pitia 58 Dealer Service 2 0 0 ce ees 369 Defroster Rear Window s 158 Defroster Windshield 70 244 Delay Intermittent Wipers 131 Diagnostic System Onboard 366 Dimmer Switch Headlight 126 Dipsticks Power Steering sesos pere pio be eae ss 286 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 382 Engine Oil ois eevee Reg RR he as 371 D or Loeks 4 4 eas 3 a RR REESE 26 Door Locks Automatic 00000008 28 Door Opener Garage so siad aeria ape aiea Ona 136 Downshifting i2l226ee3 eem ee teen ds 260 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 0 000005 116 Diving appari Sane aided daa eoe HO eg deb 270 Off Pavement llle 270 Off Road 452 2304 RE eel RR RAP REY 270 On Slippery Surfaces era nes ankai 266 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water see b ERG PER RR 267 Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Electronic Roll Mitigation Electronic Stability Program Traction Control System Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Program ESP Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 440 INDEX aaa Emergency In Case of JACKING xii ie ng cer ue y Res MESE a E 352
88. set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button u
89. speaking number combinations may not be supported in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e dry weather condition e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send e Audio quality is maximized under e Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is low to medium blower setting not in motion is recommended e low to medium vehicle speed Far End Audio Performance es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e low road noise Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec fully closed windows tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode smooth road surface dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat Power Up e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the to a large degree rely on the phone and network and ON or ACC position or after a language change you not the UConnect system must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
90. the panel and floor outlets 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demister outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix te Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost w Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control air flow ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen gers the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that the left center
91. the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one
92. this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata Artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track i
93. to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and bolt on center cap if equipped off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft Ibs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a servic
94. until US or METRIC appears to make your selection Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings 040506040 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 To Set the Variance With the ignition in the ON position quickly less than one second press and release the EVIC button several times until you have displayed the Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release less than one second the EVIC button several times until Compass Variance is highlighted The Compass Variance message and the current variance zone number will be displayed To change the zone press and hold longer than two sec onds the EVIC button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary with individual long for at least 1 second EVIC button presses for each increment until the desir
95. vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occu pants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be n
96. will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Emergency The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency
97. younger than one year old Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child e Improper installation can lead to failure of an cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion infant or child restraint It could come loose in a while the child s back is against the seatback they collision The child could be badly injured or should use a belt positioning booster seat The child killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap actly when installing an infant or child restraint shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a A rearward facing child restraint should only be front shield and are held in
98. 1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective onl
99. 60 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specification Sampling 320 256 224 192 160 128 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 4 1 92 112 95 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 PE eZ 0B TS ue 49 40 32 24 16 8 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette playe
100. 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have been shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not their gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States en STARTING AND OPERATING 331 MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added To Fuel All gaso
101. 918d49 Wiper Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the knob upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off 81918041 Washer Control 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iii Mist Feature Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single CAUTION wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the allow the wipers to return to the park position before wipers will continue to operate turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damag
102. ARTING AND OPERATING 337 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the f
103. AWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve t
104. Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the correct maintenance interval 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD AWD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained be tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 in 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the correct maintenance interval Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protect
105. Amp 1 amp Amp Lt Blue 2 Yellow 2 Feed 27 10 Amp IGN RUN Only ORC Red Feed 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 28 10Amp IGN RUN ORC OCM 36 30 Amp Headlamp Washer Red Feed Pink Control Smart Glass 29 Hot Car No Fuse Re If Equipped quired 37 25 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater 30 20Amp Heated Seats Natural If Equipped Yellow 31 10Amp Headlamp Washer CAUTION Red Relay Control If e When installing the IPM cover it is important to Equipped ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully 32 30 Amp ENG ASD Control latched Failure to do so may allow water to get Pink Feed 1 into the IPM and possibly result in an electrical 33 10 Amp ABS MOD J1962 system failure Red Conn PCM 34 30 Amp ABS Valve Feed oon Pink 35 40 Amp ABS Pump Feed Green ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 CAUTION Continued e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating be used for replacement The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it Front Header
106. CE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 496 INDEX ae ABS Anti Lock Brake System 290 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 380 Adding Fuel i e Rer ERE mai 332 Adding Washer Fluid 04 376 Additives Fuel 0 0 00 0c eee eee 331 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 372 Air Conditioner Maintenance 374 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 248 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 374 375 Air Conditioning System 374 Air
107. Controls Climate Controls ovem ev Coes ea gop ess 242 If Equipped ic csse RR 240 Manual Heating Ventilation And Air Radio Operation 0 06 240 Conditioning HVAC System 242 CD Players uus ease age aoa ated oe eae 241 Air Conditioning A C 0 246 E CD DVD Maintenance 005 241 Air Filtration System If Equipped 247 li Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 242 Operating Tips se rre adesse tie atigs Gis 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040106046 1 Air Outlet 5 Storage Bin 9 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 2 Demisters 6 Glove Compartment 10 Hazard Warning Flasher 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Climate Controls 11 ESP OFF Switch If Equipped 4 Radio 8 Power Outlet 12 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 818da26c INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge Fuel Door Reminder When the ignition switch is in the ON position Ei the pointer will show the level of fuel remain ing in the fuel tank The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light s
108. E OPEN ya TURN SIGNALS Wren am HEATED SEAT ow KEY ACTIVATE UPPER ANDLOWPR HEATED SEAT PORK QUIE AIR OUTLET HGH C DEFROST AND 10WFR AR OUTI FT D amp VENTILATING FAN SLIDING DOOR TRUM DECK AIRCONDIONNG CHILD SEAT ANCHOR L L f SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY amp oe EOR RELEASE HANDLE HILDREN LATCH DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE TOP DOWN Tor uF o MASANE We voce RECOGNITION BUTTON IY VCONNECI BUTTON m SEE OWNERS MANUAL 180 FLECINONIC SIAR IY ELECTRONIC BRAKE SPEED CONTROL ar ES 2 D AWD O ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCK DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING ORE RRAKF TOW HAUL WARNING TOW HAUL 4 LOW HAZARD FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LOW 010505550 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION M VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS
109. E transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re moved 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit B ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Flash Light With Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed
110. ER REN and REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e Ifthe radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable If the iPod battery is completely dis
111. Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME Once a Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code
112. FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder n
113. If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in this Section of this manual Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ER
114. Illuminated Approach If Equipped 22 W Power Windows If Equipped 32 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 Power Window Switches 32 Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 22 Auto Down ces 33 Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock 23 Window Lockout Switch sss 34 Using The Panic Alarm 22 urge Rx 21 Mlifgate S wens eX rta dU ceo ratus 34 Programming Additional Transmitters 24 W Occupant Restraints 000 36 General Information 0005 24 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 37 RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 42 la Door Locks ssa cos odo muni eet ed 26 Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt RIP NEERNERRNERRRR 26 Operating Instructions 42 en ee E ee 27 Seat Belt Pretensioners 46 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert ee miu ru Be ee eb ee c ee Ra 46 Seat Belt Extender 00050 47 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 48 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag 48 Event Data Recorder EDR 58 Child Restraint 4 zov ce awe es 60 ll Engine Break In Recommendations 68 i crdib MENT M 69 ExhaustG
115. In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tigh
116. M is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP for a complete explanation of the avail able ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped This system maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations HDC will auto matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to between 4 mph 7 km h and 6 mph 9 km h depending on terrain The system is activated by placing the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 295 in Off Road mode and placing the shift lever in LOW or REVERSE Refer to Safe Off Road Driving under Starting and Operating in Section 5 When HDC is properly enabled the Hill De cent Control light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated E e HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will not activate on level ground If desired HDC can be fully deactivated
117. ON RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Ss co E 5 055703771 Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed STARTING AND OPERATING 319 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS e The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driv
118. Operator Canadian Programming section es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage This can usually be found where the hanging antenna door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the NOT the button normally used to open and close the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so door proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM 1 Garage Door Opener At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate _2 Training Button the Learn or Training button 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holdin
119. PERATING 329 CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E
120. Pillar Location se oz RR Re 305 Brake Assist System 0 00000 sees 293 Brake Fluid f2345 6 i003 RR ess 406 Brake Parking i4 epe E essensa EH ge a 287 Brake System se ze oer xe rb E 289 384 Anti Lock ABS reed tanssin medta dinke 290 292 Master Cylinder 2 23 netese istana we 384 Parking s cesses es eee e dn 287 Warning Light 1 eee 2k RR ee 170 Brakes i224 24440 bo pda wee ha eae 289 384 Brake Transmission Interlock 261 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 68 Bulb Replacement 2004 397 398 Bulbs Light lt eo ss ees ee eee ea es 397 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 404 Capacities Fluid 0 0 0 0 eee 404 Caps Filler S MI 332 Oil Engine i sears acere r qoas 365371 Power 5teermeg iua i ek ac e 286 Car Washes ws iio au bint sal RU erem dre e e eps 389 Carbon Monoxide Warning 332 Cargo Area COVER cines E are ned RR ea 155 Cargo Area Features i4 sve b e ye s 154 Cargo Compartment Light 525226 PeseeRet b eru pec R4 Luggage Carrier llle Cargo Lighit ciue a Ba Yi ber Bae aes Cargo Load Floor so sista simaan iiare eee Cargo Tie Downs llle Caution Exhaust Gas as i sss eee ea Eis Cell lar Phone vesc ERE RR Center High Mounted Stop Light 438 INDEX MM Chains Tife oue ost sal amp YQ Ia EU S 318 Changing A Flat Tire 352 Chart lire Sizing e RIA eee ee E 302 Check Engine Light Malfuncti
121. Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground SO o LAC Mo od 057003765 7 Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Towing Tips When using the speed control if you experience speed Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy you can get back to cruising speed traffic Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to Towing Tips Automatic Transmission maximize fuel efficiency The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be Towing Tips Cooling System changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than P EB P ng system u 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main E reduce ihe potensial tor bn on an elena P i heating take the following actions tenance Schedule in Section 8 for transmission fluid OVS amp 5 5 change intervals City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed before towing Highway Driving Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Reduce speed Equipped Air Conditioning Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads Turn off temporarily 348 STARTING AND OPE
122. Pressure Tires 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee 310 Airbag P rm 48 Airbag Deployment 0040 53 55 Airbag Light eos es cer RR 54 57 70 168 Airbag Maintenance 0 000 eee ee 57 Airbag Side oss sd on be AS Oe ex REG 55 Airbag Window Side Curtain 49 55 Alarm Light 4 229299 xe eek ee 172 Alarm System Security Alarm 19 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 004 236 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 379 404 405 Capacities 22e eres Pee RE eed aes 404 Disposal css Hence Soest dom RR RR a 382 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 290 Anti Lock Warning Light 169 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Appearance Care ccs eda ipai eia ae 388 Assistance TOWING v xy cres eek dreneres es 95 Automatic Dimming Mirror 4 76 Automatic Door Locks llus 28 29 Automatic Transaxle 12 256 260 352 386 Fluid Level Check 2 222 ee ees 386 Interlock System 6 0 0 eee eee 262 Overheating snese stessi eene or eae tee 352 Selection Of Lubricant 000 386 Shil ng cce mx ERROR IUE EG rs 262 Special Additives 00 386 en INDEX 437 Autostick silere Hele Cat Be TES Ca ae ee IS 264 Battery prise GHEREA eg oe yatene ene eee 373 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Body Mechanism Lubrication 375 B
123. RANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Chrysler LLC 81 326 0912 First Edition Printed in U S A
124. RATING ME RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND NOTE Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may MOTORHONE ETC be recreationally towed flat towed at any legal highway d for any distance if the manual transaxle is in Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Ed y a s m Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position Towing Transaxle Transaxle Condition Vehicles Vehicles e DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a Four Wheel Flat Yes Never automatic transaxle Damage to the drivetrain will Tow All Wheels result If these vehicles require towing make sure on Ground all four wheels are off the ground Two Wheel Never Never Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Dolly Tow Front Internal damage to the transaxle will occur if a or Rear Wheels front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational on Ground towing Flat Bed Tow Yes Yes All Wheels on Bed of Truck WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll Hazard Warning Flasher 350 B if Your Engine Overheats Lise 350 Bl Automatic Transaxle Overheating 352 H Jacking And Tire Changing 352 Jack Location 0 00002 Pawis 353 Spare Tire Stowage si ss semas r ia d Samas 353 Preparations For Jacking 353 Jacking Instructions 000 354 Bl Jump Starting Procedu
125. Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary LI Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter E 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Replace the spark plug
126. S C H E D U L E S 8 422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Ooo OOC C O C If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer filter Rotate tires a 1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter a Replace the spark plugs except 2 4L PZEV 1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized
127. TARTING AND OPERATING 293 Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels
128. The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position 819197af Rear Wiper Washer Control If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to Park Rear Window Defroster The pushbutton is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster An amber light shows that the defroster is on 819179d2 The defroster will automatically turn off after approxi mately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 operation press the button a second time To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear window to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total
129. The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 433 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTAN
130. The interior door panels are equipped with upper and lower storage areas xA 035206216 Rear Door Storage 035206217 Front Door Storage es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 CONSOLE FEATURES To open the lower storage compartment lift upward on The floor console contains both an upper and lower the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart storage compartment ment and lift the lid open To open the upper storage compartment push inward on the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the upper lid 035306220 Lower Storage Compartment 035306219 E Upper Storage Compartment 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for convenience Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cell phones music Press in on the flashlight to release it players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Flashlight If Equipped The dual function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed The flashlight features two bright LED Press And Release light bulbs a
131. Turn Signals xor RES 126 168 400 UCT Connector 22e ome mem n bees 229 UConnect Hands Free Phone 81 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 165 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 432 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 229 Universal Transmitter llle 136 Unleaded Gasoline 0 000 328 Vanity Mirrors 4 4 2s veo ooa ees sis Variance Compass lees Vehicle Certification Label Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle Loading Vehicle Modifications Alterations Vehicle Storage Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 452 INDEX M Voice Recognition System VR 109 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 167 Warning Roll Over 0000000 4 Warnings and Cautions essc esa toea a emisis 7 Warranty Information a s sasaaa asera 430 Washer Adding Fluid 004 376 Washers Windshield 131 Washing Vehicle ke d edobeea RR tee 389 Water Driving Through 0005 267 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0005 390 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 390 Wind Buffeting 2 020205 eer RR eases 145 Window Airbag Side Curtain 49 55 Window Fogging 6 6 lees 249 WindOWS 4 625 408 dite des Sean ead d ete te Sg ees 32 ROWER misce be mds ae a Ea CI ein ES us 32 Windshield Washers issus 130 131 Windshield
132. Vehicle recovery should always be given consideration before attempting a questionable obstacle You should never go off road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a situation Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most situations The first thing to do is assess the situation Why are you stuck Are you hung up on something Would it be easier to go forward or to go backward Can you still move the vehicle Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to help Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process Answering these questions will help you determine the best method of recovery If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick ground then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first choice If you have ample room an additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impingement on the surroundings then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be taken during the recovery then nothing can do the job better than a winch If you are severely hung up on something you should jack the vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing further damage This should be tried before attempting any recovery method CAUTION Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle without first clearing the object may result i
133. Wipers 000005 130 375 Wipers Intermittent i sisse e es 131 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 391 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems INSTALLATION OF RADIO T
134. able ride Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to
135. accident Have the vehicle checked immediately 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others es If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However The ABS light monitors the ABS System The light
136. acing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freez ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine
137. active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR hard key and say Help or Main Menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Commands The Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported e Memo to switch to the memo recorder Radio to switch to the radio mode Disc to switch to the disc mode radio mode is achive e System Setup to switch to system setup ome Changing the velune Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key Wave If Equipped 2 Say a command e g Help To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In b di i this mode you may say the following commands 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion system is speaking Please note the volume setting e Next Station to select
138. ain overheating the right transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode e When heavy Anti Lock Brake System ABS applica and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off tion is detected e If the system detects a problem it will disable the Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected General Information e If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the 1st gear ratio e Ifa low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time on demand four wheel drive AWD J 051906185 Four Wheel Drive Switch Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi tional traction is needed in sand deep snow or loose traction surfaces activate the 4WD LOCK switch by pulling up once and releasing This locks the center coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels The 4WD Indicator Light will come on in the cluster This can be done on the fly at any vehicle speed To deactivate simply pull on the switch one more time The 4WD Indicator Light will then go out NOTE Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in the Electronic Brake Control System section of this m
139. ained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program omm ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the or
140. air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off imme diately and call for service ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to high This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over when safe and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Maintenance Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings unde
141. al CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi cation Samplin en Hz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 Layer 3 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title mm are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not suppo
142. alfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 4WD Indicator Light This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD Locked mode 24
143. ames is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 1
144. ammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors hood liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm the horn will sound for 30 seconds and flash the lights for 60 sec onds If the triggering device is not deactivated the horn will sound again after a five second delay for another 30 seconds If the trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for up to five minutes To Set The Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds This shows that the system is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are un
145. ange indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the sched uled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 25 OFF ROAD Indicator If Equipped The symbol illuminates is armed when the 4WD lock switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of LS an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the light does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions
146. anual for additional information DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
147. anufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnec
148. arnings which apply to use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited your spare Failure to do so could result in spare use spare tire warning label located on the limited use tire failure and loss of vehicle control spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time 314 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Keep it inflated to the cold For additional information refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire plac ard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tir
149. arry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to E the yea
150. as 2 2 e LEG e N 69 I Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle ves Re Re RR ee 69 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle llis 70 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 8163e6a8 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission If Equipped 1 Place the shift lever in PARK 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC Accessory position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 ESAE EE SEEE described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Ignition Switch Positions 1
151. ase and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically this is called express close During express close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during express close operation If an obstruc tion in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove obstruction and press the switch forward and release to express close es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the close position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and hold the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called express vent and will occur regardless of the sunroof position During express vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type so
152. at ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How The Airbag System Works Side Remote Acceleration Sensors if equipped Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above side win dows if equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Seat Belt Reminder Light Knee Impact Bolsters e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC This ORC will detect rollover The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee impact bolster the instrument panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for six to eight N seconds as a self check when the ignition is
153. at affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning 328 STARTING AND OPERATING limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
154. axle 0 000000 ee 386 Power Steering sdas aan orina EE Dan GUE EEE BraS 286 FIGS 44 28 eaea e E EL Ed ee ox 405 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 405 Fog Lights sees ehe wey 124 177 400 Folding Rear Seat esee RR me 120 Folding Rear Seat Sedan 120 Four Wheel Drive llle 266 DYSLEMS xa seer PEE P ere d Rep ee dus aL 266 Four Wheel Drive Operation 266 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0 360 Fuel iuis eee UR ERE ee ae i 328 405 Adding we bse eee de dd oem te RU eer a 332 Additives soia Rog RI Res 331 Capacity cease otium ee 9r ern soa 404 Clean Air oases ea bee ao a E ek Os 329 Filler Cap Gas Cap cs 6 0 0 0 0000000 332 Gasoline cease has ava ner dw eo ede ee 328 Gape ooa que Duda ea ieee eae 167 Light o voyda heaped oo Mead ea Ge as ees 168 Octane Rating 0 0 0 2 eee eee 328 Requirements 22er eer RS perese 328 Tank Capacity ese ee soe eot dd 404 Fuel System Caution s reest s earosd e iaa 334 Fueling aerea eee dee eet d a ses 332 Puses L32zdaese d b Red AR dads 394 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 136 Gas Cap Fuel Fillr Cap 332 334 366 Gasoline Clean Aif 2 2 es 329 Gasoline Fuel 2 005 328 404 Gasoline Reformulated 329 Gauges Coolant Temperature ees 172 Fuel cvacuea gaveedgad dee ee pages Sees 167 Odometer xs cero seg ae eU AGO Aes 175 Tacho
155. ayer mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until
156. by putting the vehicle into ESP Full Off mode This is done by pressing and holding the ESP OFF button for five seconds Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in this section of the manual HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Se normal When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving At vehicle speeds above 31 mph 50 km h HDC will no longer function If the HDC indicator light begins to flash this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over steering or under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steering or under steering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the
157. c3e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to High beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to Low beam ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 30 seconds the High beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation Off Road Lights If Equipped CAUTION The auxiliary lights mounted on the front bumper should be illuminated during Off Road Use Only Having them illuminated on public streets high ways roads etc may be illegal in your state Your 81913b52 High Beam Low Beam Control state may also require auxiliary lights to be covered Flash to Pass when operating your vehicle on public streets high You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by ways roads etc Further illuminating these lights lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This with supplied covers installed could cause perma will cause the headlights to turn on at High beam and nent damage to the lights or covers Before using remain on until the lever is releas
158. capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in the case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 WARNING CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take e Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors the temporary use spare tire needs to be Limited Use Spare If Equipped replaced The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency Be sure to follow the w
159. ccess With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within th
160. ccident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun Power Sunroof Switch roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 815d5564 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening the Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Express Mode Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically this is called express open During express open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing the Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial close condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again To ensure sunroof is fully closed press and hold switch until sunroof has completely stopped moving Express Mode Press the switch forward and rele
161. ce llle 431 Manual Transaxle 256 258 386 Downs MINE 2 ick ar eem baw e iotas 260 Fluid Level Check slssn 387 388 Frequency of Fluid Change 387 388 Lubricant Selection 386 387 388 Map Reading Lights 04 129 Master Cylinder Brakes 005 384 Mirrors 32 Seah OSA a ee SS eee P RO eR 75 Automatic Dimming llle 76 Electric Powered reaa er a N 79 Exterior Folding 00000 78 Outside sse 444 264504 bo os ee ee ea x eR 77 Rearview isses rn ree dae See See 75 Vanity ise eid aes ata te Bee ae ed a 80 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 319 Mopat Patt ioa gone wa the boa a s wp es 368 430 Multi Function Control Lever 123 New Vehicle Break In Period 68 Occupant Restraints sesend orie anre RR Rear 36 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 328 Odometer is kG eR p ere we ae 175 TD 40 Se Sade O 173 175 Oil Change Indicator 00 0000 180 Oil Change Indicator Reset 180 Oil Engihe seca m em ee 369 404 Capacity ac eoe ni paua ce V E eer Sue VERE A 404 Change Interval 205 0 5254 ee es 370 Checking scie BP ERR 369 Disposal sse pesata ee desc e 371 Filtet icu spy anita cases UE CP As 372 Identification Logo 446 INDEX aaa Materials Added to 0005
162. charged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Artist track title album etc information on the radio display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning
163. cle 70 Safety Defects Reporting 6 430 Safety Information Tire 00 300 Safety Tips 2 2 Sona Rx e SIR end s ee ce dug ce 69 Satellite Radio see 234 10 448 INDEX MM Satellite Radio Antenna 05 236 Schedule Maintenance 00005 408 Seat Belt Maintenance 000000 393 Seat Belt Reminder llle 46 Seat Belts llle 36 Adjustable Shoulder Belt issus 42 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 42 And Pregnant Women sice etossicserit ass 48 Child Restraint eee eee 60 Extender 4404 ia dE Dea rei ed oie eed 47 Front Seat 44 gue anra AEG Ren Blew RN 37 Pretensioners llle 46 R r Seat ia rs ELO Kata maa Exe Pres 37 Seals og e a Cod a CR ed OUR Rao DA S A 114 Adj stn nt Sons 3 Gai waa ges ee repens 114 Cleaning cesa ub oes eed ene ae eae a 391 Head Restraints 0 0 00 insta 117 Heated coea eeraa aea aR ae hes dux ae 117 Lumbar Support 0000000 116 Rear Folding i000 404 van MSRP REX PEE 120 Rear Folding Sedan 004 120 Seatback Release llle 116 Tig seas eei me eher E RE 116 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Selection of Oil 2 0 eee 370 Sentry Key Immobilizer 16 20 Sentry Key Programming 60 18 Sentry Key Replacement 17 Service Assistance
164. cle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint refer to information on Child Restraint in this section 6 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 7 All occupants should use their seat belts properly 8 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate 9 If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean against the doors as airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 10 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section in this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side curtain airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the se
165. comes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 US DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design m standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Exampl
166. compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 When adding engine coolant antifreeze a minimum solution of 50 recommended MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are antici pated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution
167. coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add flui
168. could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up MANUAL TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED 5 Speed Manual Transaxle WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline STARTING AND OPERATING 259 Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears As Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera sure the transaxle is in 1st gear not 3rd when starting tor pedal from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in 3rd gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations 5th gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a 80f7bc4b complete stop Shift Pattern NOTE During c
169. cts and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240
170. d in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward until it stops e Look at the shift indicator window on the shift lever bezel to ensure it is in the PARK position e You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise dam age to the steering column or shift lever could result You must also depress the brake pedal 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ME REVERSE Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL The engine may be started in this range DRIVE This should be used for most driving and provides the best ratio for optimum drivability fuel economy and performance AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during pass
171. d 353 Spinning dux dba ce gx ep ed ues 314 Tread Wear Indicators llle 315 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 341 TOWING xac ace deo p Roe acq Sdn aae we Ran 337 24 Hour Towing Assistance 95 Disabled Vehicle 00 0000 0c cues 361 Guide ce teci rateke riu ni Pedri P35 Ade 340 Recreational 0 0 0 eee ee eee 348 Weight ssec ek cR EET wa 4 340 Towing Assistance eee 95 Trailer Towing anesini aueia eee 337 Cooling System Tips 0 0 00 000 347 Hitches u a d cea ROSE URS 339 Minimum Requirements 342 NENNEN INDEX 451 Trailer and Tongue Weight 341 Wiring 65 us bee use Er Rr RR Be BEES 345 Trailer Towing Guide 000040 340 Trailer Weight cicer nme 340 Transaxle cts eraa atat Redon a hier Ir ae 260 Automatic ee aeres aeaee aea E rares 12 256 260 386 Autostick sikrere 00 tket iea kE a eee 264 Manual 242 954p ELS e 14 256 258 Operation 22 ha does ORO RO ace d RR Re Rok Rn 260 Overdrive audes e dep3ed oe cue dace 264 Selection of Lubricant lesen 386 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry llle 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 136 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 24 Transporting Pets 68 Tread Wear Indicators llle 315 Trip Odometer lt s 2s ca Magee tee us 175 Trip Odometer Reset Button 173
172. d in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that may be recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the 2o airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Cruise control status WARNING e Traction stability control status y In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby e Tire pressure monitoring system status can become a missile inside the vehicle The force Child Restraint required to hold even an infant on your lap could Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in yo
173. d to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transaxle clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re CAUTION fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall WARNING e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle Use onl
174. ds or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR hard key say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Front Seat Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats near the floor Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired position Front Seat Adjustment es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Using body pressure move forward and rearward onthe Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the handle on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the WARNING driving position e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against y
175. dshield 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated x Automatic Dimming Mirror B1f1be98 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 Outside Mirror Driver s Side Outside Mirror Passenger s Side Adjust the flat drivers side outside mirror to center on Adjust the convex passengers side outside mirror to the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap view obtained on the inside mirror of the view obtained on the inside mirror 818f17de Drivers Side Mirror Directions Passenger Side Mirror Directions 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judgin
176. e 31x10 5 R15 LT 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in es STARTING AND OPERATING 303 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can c
177. e Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Rear Seat LATCH Child restraints systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route
178. e area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed WARNING If you are required to drive with the deck lid liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized
179. e at the first oppor tunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting
180. e chime Headlights On Key In Ignition Check TPM System Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Functions EVIC Button Press the EVIC button until one of the following func tions is displayed on the EVIC e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Econ
181. e dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by
182. e engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the igni
183. e event of an impact that causes airbag deployment with the vehicle stopped and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func tions e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the Flashes hazard lights airbags have been deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you e Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlocks the doors automatically ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Maintaining Your Airbag System Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While S the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you Do not modify the components or e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers wiring including adding any kind of badges or during the six to eight seconds when the ignition stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the switch is first turned on upper passenger side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body struc ture or frame
184. e loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional t
185. e right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type be o lh No program type or un Pr defined None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cl
186. e station 9 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued e Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get NOTE Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic the ON position will cause vehicles with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way and may be transaxle CVT2 to go into default mode and turn on damaged Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL See your autho converter and once the engine has started i
187. e that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 7 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 81182c72 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the scre
188. e the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs except 2 4L PZEV Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or Schedule 78 Months Maintenance 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule 2 Rotate tires 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace i
189. e to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted 81918d45 Mist Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 TILT STEERING COLUMN WARNING To tilt the steering column push down on the lever below the turn signal control lever With one hand firmly on the Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is wheel move the steering column up or down as desired moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving Tilting Steering Column Control 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want Yo
190. e to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION WATERINFUEL REAR WINDOW EXTERIOR BULB WIPER FAILURE gt N x i f 1 FUEL RCARWNDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH ENGINE OL REARWINDOW CLECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS DEFROST HEATED t3 Up pI BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION C x GLOW PLUG POWER WINOSHIELDWIPER SIDE AIRBAG STEERING FLUID ANDWASMER SRS b RIRHRG ee LFU MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP D e 7 ZO e 4 FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOO RELEASE Qt PASSENGER TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF LIFTGATE RELEASE AND LIFTGAT
191. e too quick for use of the UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recogni
192. eat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped side airbags for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All
193. ecessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That
194. ed Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free mm Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with
195. ed YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solv
196. ed these auxiliary lights contact your State Authorities for proper operation and use of these lights 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The auxiliary Off Road lights can be turned on when off road conditions require additional lighting To turn the auxiliary Off Road light on turn on the High beam headlights and press the top of the switch To turn off the auxiliary Off Road lights press the bottom of the switch NOTE The High beam headlights must be on for the auxiliary Off Road lights to operate Off Road Light Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror Each light is turned on by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light off The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 81790d82 Map Reading Lights NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS X The wipers and washers are operated by a switch S on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column Windshield Wiper Operation Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed 81
197. ed approach is the key to maintaining your en STARTING AND OPERATING 275 vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a roll over If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempted to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on whe
198. ed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best 022606194 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Second Row Center Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions The second row center lap shoulder belt features a three point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle which allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded The mini buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way
199. ed variance is achieved To exit the Vari ance Programming press the EVIC button with a short less than one second button press NOTE The factory default is Zone 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and release the EVIC button less than one second several times until the EVIC displays the Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu 3 Once in the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu press and release the EVIC button less than one second several times until Calibrate Compass Yes is displayed 4 Press the EVIC button more than one second this will place the Compass in calibration mode The CAL indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the compass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate 5 Press the EVIC button less than one second from the Calibrate Compass Yes screen will exit the EVIC Customer Programmable Features and return it to its normal operating mode 6 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or
200. el housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information
201. els and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a correspond
202. en less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warn ing limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for
203. ension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 BEET 2 112 98 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MPEG Audio aa 22 05 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bis Katee ps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Mult
204. ents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to resto
205. equired when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 432 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
206. er 3x 4 4 2a ORES apa Ha a 169 Taillights 9 edere BE PR RE e Rees 400 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 172 351 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 64 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 19 Theft System Security Alarm 19 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 0 50 00 00 eae 156 Tilt Steering Column asa siessen terasi 133 Tire and Loading Information Placard 305 Tire Identification Number TIN Tire Markings 450 INDEX MM Tire Safety Information ss sceo aiae ne iaa 300 WitesS 4212404 Soke Fee be EEE TEN 70 309 432 Aging Life of Tires essene inea ehea as 315 Air Pressure 00000 eee 309 CHAINS ses ohh Seach E 318 Changing ee semie sd ed reu Eee edi 352 Compact Spare cass Aw s debe due E Ree 312 Flat Changing 4353229 ests sapete ss 357 General Information sass sasaaa uean 309 High Speedi ereere IRR ERES 312 Inflation Pressures 1 2 0 0 eee eee 310 Jacking 22435 40 4 408 ee EUER Ree dons 352 Life of Tires 5s0 05 RR RLU RERSESXRS 315 Load Capacity cesy 6 0 cee eee 305 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 319 Pressure Warning Light 173 Quality Grading sesyen reari ioie 432 Radial as EErEE REOR ANTER 312 Replacement Rotation ss sie cate E eh ee Bae he S 318 Safety scs a Ra Re hae base 300 309 SIZES a ughgc ge eu eX a pa bale Pare he as d 302 Snow lites ssa serere sga pd Pana PER RES 318 Spare D caes goes dU SR eae ee
207. er Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Ooo OOC C O C 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Flush and replace the engine coolant Replace the spark plugs 2 4L PZEV Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months O O O C Odometer
208. er assembly This Yellow center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label 6 10 Amp IOD Sw Pwr Mir that identifies each component may be printed on the Red Steering Cntrl Sdar inside of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in Hands Free Phone this section of the Owner s Manual for the underhood 7 30 Amp IOD Sense1 location of the IPM Green Cavity Cartridge Mini Description 8 e Amp IOD Sense2 Fuse Fuse reen 1 Empty Empty 9 40 Amp Power Seats Green osa pees 10 20 Amp CCN Power Locks Yellow Interior Lighting 3 10 Amp CHMSL Brake Switch Red Feed 11 Hu ed Power Outlet JLtBue O j m an aaa SANESA 12 20 Amp Ign Run Acc Inverter Yellow ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 13 20 Amp Pwr Run Acc Outlet 20 15 Amp IOD Feed Radio Yellow RR Dome Lamp Lt Blue 14 10 Amp IODCCN 21 10Amp IOD Feed Intrus Red Red Mod Siren If 15 40 Amp RAD Fan Relay Bat Equipped Green tery Feed 22 10 Amp IGN RUN Heat AC 16 15 Amp IGN Run Acc Dome Red Compass Sensor Lt Blue Lamp Sunroof Rear 23 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed Wiper Motor ACC Lt Blue 3 Inverter 24 15 Amp Power Sunroof Feed 17 10Amp IOD Feed Mod Wcm Lt Blue Red 25 10 Amp Heated Mirror If 18 40 Amp ASD Relay Contact Red Equipped Green PWR Feed 26 15 Amp ENG ASD Relay Feed 19 20 Amp PWR
209. er clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET Buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on mm the second line e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines e Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors
210. erage Fuel Economy Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed IME sich oh a8 ey oe aed ale 183 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 183 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features munagi aerae ace E he ae oar aeta 183 B Electronic Digital Clock issues 189 Clock Setting Procedure 189 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack eee eee Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play E AM FM CD DVD Multimedia System Radio RER REN If Equipped Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped s nies ritt enye RR Clock Setting Procedure H Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack 00 Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3Files Operation Instruc
211. eration of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is on It does not show the degree of brake application If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert
212. erfill the engine Overfilling the engine as indicated by the range markings as described above on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for recommended engine oil change intervals Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance inter
213. erinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Underinflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort
214. ers etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL 362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACC position not in the LOCK position Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a removable plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The ignition key must be in the ON position to use the override lever MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 2 0L 2 4L 365 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 366 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 366 Wl Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs siue ei ee reme erra 367 la Replacement Parts o cess xe re n Rm 368 H Dealer Service 0 0 ee ee 369 Bl Maintenance Procedures
215. essage was previously cleared WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESP Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light and the yellow ESP Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles 300 STARTING AND OPERATING and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP be
216. etween Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOC NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect sy
217. eze Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than e This vehicle has not been designed for use with specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro tection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emer Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Continued Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze gency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be
218. f necessary T Rotate tires J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary LI Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary E Replace the air conditioning filter 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires J Replace the engine air cleaner filter Q Replace the spark plugs except 2 4L PZEV Q Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary t 1 Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysl
219. f the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx However if you haven t healed significantly within a WARNING few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed airbags can t protect you in another colli sion Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning e Cuts off fuel to the engine Enhanced Accident Response System In th
220. fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains sophis ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This in terference can cause possible loss of Anti Lock brak ing capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad vanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Hill Decent Control HDC and Elec tronic Stability Program ESP All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in this Section of the manual for more information about ABS ee S
221. first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli sion severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag
222. formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of norm
223. g Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible 31 4WD Warning Light This light monitors the 4 Wheel Drive 4WD system The light will come on for a bulb check when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as three seconds When lit solid There is an 4WD system fault 4WD performance will be at a reduced level Service the 4WD system soon 4WD When blinking The 4WD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition 32 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages For more information refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in this section of the manual 33 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Button If Equipped Pushing this button will change the display to the choices available for EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE
224. g a tire change help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 WARNING Continued If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher BSAN Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 81961547 Jacking Locations 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 3 3 There are two front jacking locations and two rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts the rear ones by two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw
225. g the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully tr
226. g the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved manually either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal 819616ba Folding the Outside Mirrors UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 Power Mirrors If Equipped To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand trim panel in the direction you want the mirror to move When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror am 030406198 Power Mirror Control 819616ac Passenger Side Mirror Directions 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the mirror pull the sun visor down and rotate the mirror cover upward Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
227. ger Seat 119 Off Road Lights If Equipped 127 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 Map Reading Lights 129 Manual Transaxle 00 136 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 130 To Accelerate For Passing 136 Windshield Wiper Operation 130 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped 136 Intermittent Wiper System 131 Programming HomeLink Windshield Washers peni cerit amase ass 131 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Mist Featute secs ee red eer aS 132 Using Homelink sssssss 141 H Tilt Steering Column 000 0 133 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 134 BUREN Tsay es nese otes sae ee die M To Activate 00 cece eee eee 134 SHY A m To Set At A Desired Speed aurrea ceee 134 Troubleshooting Tips 142 To Deactivate Lec LLL Lu 135 General Information sss reanna sarana 142 vo Resume a E N 135 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 143 To Vary The Speed Setting 0000 135 Opening The Sunroof 144 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Clo
228. gnite rized dealer to correct this condition and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done im properly so follow this procedure carefully such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured 1 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK the manual transmis sion in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition to OFF for both Continued vehicles ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical WARNING Continued loads e A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam 3 Using the two finger screws on the cover remove the mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away air intake duct covering the battery from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive or any other booster source with an output that terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of exceeds 12 Volts the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis charged battery 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of WARNING the disc
229. h to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly so follow the procedure carefully See Section 6 of this manual for jump starting instructions Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting pro cedure WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This
230. harged battery Make sure you have a good mm contact e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over the battery when attaching the 6 If the vehicle is equipped with a Sentry Key Immo bilizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in your eyes or on your skin flush the contaminated area immediately with large 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster quantities of water battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the Continued engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se WARNING quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle tire NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con damage or failure A tire could explode and injure trol or ESP turn the system OFF before attempting to someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster tock the vehicle than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel
231. he 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in this section for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section for the proper inspection pro cedure 344 STARTING AND OPERATING Se When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over tion in this section for proper tire replacement proce 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of dures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying 2 000 Ibs 907 kg capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and CAUTION GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or IUe C ghould bave IE HBIKEN and they vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher
232. he Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 12 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 13 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi CUT tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Furthe
233. he radio will tune to the preset station ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between be J Il playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped VES CH
234. he spare if provided SET l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS m
235. hicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power WINDOW switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCKOUT switch To enable the window con trols press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time 021906197 Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors The central locking unlocking feature if equipped can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the ke
236. hree seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the chann
237. ight turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 6 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 7 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for seven 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition S switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 8 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated 9 High Beam Indicator This indicator shows that the headlights are on m high beam Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 10 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light If Equipped This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System 8s ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that t
238. iginal transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an a
239. in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability es STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering
240. in the right side trim panel for added convenience 1 Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint Mini Latch Stowage 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the Seat 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 6 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click v 022606149 Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt 4 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the mini latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click Connecting Mini Latch To Buckle 7 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up 5 Sit back in the seat Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight 9 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding OR under the belt in a collision s Detaching Mini Latch and Buckle 10 To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled storage insert the regular latch plate into the black 8 Position the sh
241. ing button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next listenable station Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK down for the next listenable station ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 The butt
242. ing city driv ing cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Automatic ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the Continu ously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT and or the engine from overspeed Changes down will only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stalling Operation NOTE Autostick is not functional until the CVT warms up in cold weather Autostick operation is activated in the DRIVE position by moving the shift lever side to side Moving the shift lever to the side will activate Autostick and shift up to the next higher manual ratio unless you are already operating in or near Overdrive in which case 6th ratio will be selected In like manner moving the shift lever to will activate Autostick and shift to the next lower manual ratio After Autostick is activated the manual ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display and tipping the shift lever to the or direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Autostick is deactivated e If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine However the CVT will stay in the manually selected e When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE ratio e By holding the shift lever to momentarily e When in 6th position touching the shift lever to the e If the system detects powertr
243. into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunc
244. ion The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes of corrosion are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain hole
245. ion gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4
246. ion compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF
247. isession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or mm more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device
248. ition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogr
249. itioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn bg 646 the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between oT S3 Jand S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near 4 If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and ZJ In very cold weather 73 if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 2 045605322 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Window Fogging Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows set mode to the mix or defrost position Direct the panel outlets toward the side windows Do not use recirculate without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by using the defrost position If the fogging problem persists clean the inside window surfaces The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect ing on the inside surface of the glass NOTE In cold weather the use of the recircu late position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle Moisture and ice can also accumulate on the inside of the sheet metal and may result in headliner and or electronic component damage For maximum defogging press the recirculation button until recirculate is off Summer Operation Air c
250. jectiles if a strap breaks which could cause severe injury Never leave more than 2 to 3 ft 61 to 91 cm of slack in the strap More slack than this greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage Always keep everyone at least 30 ft 9 m away from a strapping or winching situation After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After driving off road it is always a good idea to check for damage e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard or they might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have brake drums and rotors brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for packed material Packed foreign material can cause a wheel imbalance and cleaning the wheels will correct the situation WARNING Abra
251. l light housing 2 Grasp the tail light and pull firmly to disengage the light from the aperture panel 3 Twist and remove socket from the light 4 Remove bulb from socket and replace gu PE NOTE These are halogen bulbs Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 License Lights 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise 1 Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the light from the liftgate 8180e722 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Pull the bulb from the socket Auxiliary Off Road Light 1 Remove the three screws attaching the lens to the housing Center High Mounted Stoplight Light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement 81c68d11 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 2 Unlatch the wire clasp securing the bulb into the 3 Disconnect the bulb from the light harness to replace housing and rotate it into the position shown the bulb J 3 481568039 lh a ce8d4b 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 13 6 Gallons 51 5 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 0L and 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 5 Quarts 4 26 Liters Cooling System 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 7 2 Quarts Year
252. l tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is Fuel Filler Door in violation of most state and Federal fire regula tions and will cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on 334 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II in Section 7 of this manual for more information CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or
253. l the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE Continuous use of the recirculate mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Conditioning A C A C Operation Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A lamp will illumi nate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Once the air conditioning is engaged use a combination of the mode control fan speed control and tempera 81caad38 ture control to achieve your de sired interior temperature NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 MAX A C For maximum cooling select the air direction to either the Panel or Bi Level position using the mode control Press the A C button and the recirculation button so that both lamps are illuminated and y set the temperature control to its 81cab384 coolest setting NOTE e Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes e See Circulation Control in this section for proper or extended use of this position
254. l through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area You should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and ESP turned off Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop
255. le moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to deter mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If neces sary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increas ing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition
256. line sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of Methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 332 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Carbon Monoxide Warnings e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time WARNING the vehicle is raised Have a
257. locked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm After approximately 16 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed To Disarm The System 1 Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter 2 Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry Key will disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm A valid key is one that is programmed to your vehicle A valid key will disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm an invalid key will allow the engine to run for two seconds and stop Vehicle Security Alarm System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to 66 ft 20 m using a handheld Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 8163e6a8 Three Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will als
258. luetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit UConnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home nu
259. may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off 4WD Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESP Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the Trip Odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 In this mode ESP is turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph 56 km h At 35 mph 56 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode as described above When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving however ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 35 mph 56 km h The ESP Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the ESP On mode of operation NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and an audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the m
260. mber but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete UConnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All UConnect Phonebook Entries e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will
261. ment Panel Lens Cleaning 393 en INDEX 443 Integrated Power Module Fuses 394 Interior Appearance Care 00005 391 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 131 Introduction i vs eee Rede aed Gad 4 Jack Location isse oy ane oe ele 353 Jack Operation sasiy sigan sp se beraa ah a 352 354 Jacking Instructions sse scieririr eni siag 354 JUMp Starting 3 sca said eas Meh EDAD aS 358 Key Programming s acsee skaainamme kka tisna 18 Key Replacement 2 22 ER beak mitis 17 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 16 Key In Reminder sas cesses bem Rm 15 Keyless Entry System Sedan 20 c d PT Oe eas wes Y 12 Knee Bolster 22 02 ise ee 48 Lane Change and Turn Signals 400 Lap Shoulder Belts Latches Hood Lead Free Gasoline Life Of Tir s sssr ku RR ere R GRENE 315 Liftgate Sedan eere RR 34 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer Light Bulbs 52i soccer REPRE 397 JEn CIE 70 123 Anti Lock Back Up Brake Warning 2 neis datie ie eee Bulb Replacement 04 Cargo Center Mounted Stop Daytime Running 0000s aes Dimmer Switch Headlight 44 INDEX M Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 2142212 4e dned irit e hae 297 299 Engine Temperature Warning 170 FOS sS204 9nd Peer eeseva meds 124 177 400 Headlight Switch a s sese RR nex 123 Headlights 15 ke dureh 123 High Beam Indicator
262. meter 442 INDEX M Gearshift 52 deus ur ab a a Nang 262 General Information 19 109 328 General Maintenance 0000005 369 Glass Cleaning 43s cep ore dr 392 Gross Axle Weight Rating 337 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 335 337 Hands Free Phone UConnect 81 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water isses ace e 267 Hazard Warning Flasher 350 Head Restraints 0 0 00 eee eee 117 Headlights 2 6 s24 re Ret eames 398 Cleaning uvas use whe rhe Seated 392 High Beam eee 126 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 126 PASSING or sie aetna ae tow a ae eo aed S aa 127 Replacing SWitehl e vu carte ea dt os ea ae ae 123 Heated Seats ee ees 117 Hill Descent Control 00 177 295 Hitches Trailer TOWING xd yada eke aye eee 339 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 136 Hood Release ee ee 121 Igr ttone hha kan cassa Ke ea RR 12 Key nieder d ex d ed CAG one CoG ERES 12 Ignition Key Removal eessse 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key 4 16 20 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 00 eee ee ee 61 Information Center Vehicle Ls 179 Inside Rearview Mirror less 75 Instrument Cluster 0 0 0 0 cee eee 167 Instrument Panel and Controls 165 Instrument Panel Cover sls 392 Instru
263. mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver s door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors
264. more complete 360 degree circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed timekeeping is accurately maintained On the AM FM CD 6 disc radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the AM FM CD single disc radio only one of the two time or frequency is displayed Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE AUDIO con trol knob 3 After the hours are adjusted push the TUNE AUDIO control knob to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE AUDIO control knob 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately five seconds 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 6 DISC MP3 WMA
265. more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pre
266. n Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until DRIVER S DOOR 1ST or ALL DOORS appears to make your selection ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Headlights On With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by thi
267. n additional under body damage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Rock Cycling Your Vehicle Rock cycling your vehicle is one of the easiest fastest and most commonly used methods This simply involves shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE while applying throttle after each shift During this process for additional traction try turning your steering wheel quickly back and forth no more than a 1 4 turn If you are stuck in mud sand or snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean the debris from the tread and improve the traction You want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle This helps build vehicle momentum which hopefully gets you out Remember to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the shift If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free stop and try another method of recovery Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment CAUTION Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an excessive high speed Do not spin your tires faster than an indicated 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continuously for more than 30 seconds Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap Tow straps are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which is not stuck The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery Do not use the bumper or any o
268. n the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards count
269. nate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the ro
270. nd is powered by rechargeable lithium ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high Cargo Cover If Equipped twice for low and a third time to return to off The cargo area trim panels include two notches for mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo dates the reclining rear seat WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle 81814415 Three Press Switch 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Removable Load Floor The cargo area load floor is removable and can be washed with mild soap and water 035406043 Cargo Load Floor Cargo Tie Down Loops There are four D rings installed in the cargo area for securing cargo WARNING e Cargo tie down loops are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal i
271. ned your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle es STARTING AND OPERATING 277 slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of dis
272. njury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Continued es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING Continued e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The aaa CR rear cargo space is intended for load carrying Fold Down Speakers purposes only not for passengers who should sit REAR WINDOW FEATURES in seats and use seat belts Rear Window Wiper Washer A switch on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the on position will Fold Down Speakers If Equipped When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down off the trim panel to face rearward for tailgating and other activities 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M activate the wiper The rear wiper operates in an inter mittent mode only Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function
273. ntil the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds mm The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to th
274. ny abnormal conditions ired tly Until ired dri ith all sid Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly i NC aa aa windows fully open Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon haust gases from entering the vehicle monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a ADDING FUEL garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap engine running for an extended period of time If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable CAUTION over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc surface tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fue
275. o assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Use
276. o tight ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 022606193 Positioning Lap Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle 1 WARNUNGI The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully EB be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed A fray
277. o turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to RKE Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equip
278. occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity This vehicle is not equipped with roof rack cross rails as built unless ordered as optional equipment Cross rails must be installed prior to carrying loads on the roof rack If not equipped your authorized dealer can order and install Mopar cross rails built specifically for this roof rack system or a number of aftermarket rails that are tailored to your lifestyle or activities NOTE The optional cross rails have seven specific locations identified by a feature on both the side rail and the cross rail Cross rails must be secured in one of the seven detent locations on the side rail to prevent move ment with a sudden stop For improved wind noise performance when cross rails are not in use place them in detent positions two second detent from the front of the vehicle and seven detent closest to the rear of the vehicle as indicated with a unique feature on the side rails 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the cross rails installed The load should be secured roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or and placed on top of the cross rails not directly on nearby truck
279. oice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure Global Positioning System GPS RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time
280. oid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil or refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinder
281. old weather until the transaxle lubri cant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION If you skip more than one gear while downshifting Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following table Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds Units in mph km h Engine meee san eration 1 to2 2to3 3to4 4to5 Rate All En Accel 14 23 23 37 29 47 45 72 gines Cruise 12 19 18 29 25 40 32 52 Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life or downshift at too high a vehicle speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to 2nd or 1st gear when descending a steep grade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED NOTE The Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle CVT changes ratios in a continuous manner This may sometimes feel as if it is slipping but this is normal and does not harm anything ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 CAUTION WARNING Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or p
282. omy 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Distance To Empty DTE e Elapsed Time e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM e Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the EVIC button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be dis played during this three second window Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in this Section Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to
283. on Indicator Light 367 Ghild Resttalnt 445 2 hor sce RU e eed 60 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 64 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 63 Child Safety Locks eee m 31 Child Seat is ow Bese 3e ev p ce Re RPM 66 Clean Air Gasoline llle 329 Cleaning Wheels soo ke ER aaa e ERES 390 Climate Control 0 0 0 000 0 eee eee 242 Clock si pik Bars ee eo es 189 192 206 209 219 Chath 4 gad e warec ised ences ote a bh Ae es Bea 384 Clutch Fluid iu usus rr Gene eas 384 Com Holder 222 me rax ie eae eae sd 153 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 241 Compact Spare Tire sessar setnie r diie het 312 Compass Variance llle 186 Connector UCh L2lixsis eben meg epe EAE 229 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 229 Console i422 ug use URP ea Rom ees 153 Contract Service niir triana naes 429 Coolant Antifreeze lessen 404 405 Cooling System ois ce e heh Rr 378 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 380 Coolant Level 0 00000 379 382 Disposal of Used Coolant 382 Drain Flush and Refill 379 Inspection ici evec yum d Re RIE Hs 382 Points to Remember lius 381 383 P ress te Cap ososkilsesesee9 ees 381 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 379 Corrosion Protection 200 2 e eee 388 Cruise Light 2 04 sees see m n 173 en INDEX 439 C pholdefs sce Eug cae Bee DS
284. on located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons CD Player Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on the CD Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc over
285. on to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling B
286. onditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Outside Air Intake When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake directly in front of the wind shield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of vehicle operation 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is at each end of the instrument panel These nonadjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in either the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 256 Manual Transmission If Equipped 256 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 256 Normal Starting scrisese pap o eei 256 Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C s rauast aeaea 257 If Engine Fails To Start 0 257 After Starting 20 sa ed cea pibe eges 258 ll Manual Transaxle
287. one and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a e The system will prompt you to say the number you priority level between one and seven with one being want to call the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use e The UConnect system will confirm the phone num connected to your UConnect system The priority ber and then dial The number will appear in the allows the UConnect system to know which cellular display of certain radios phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the e Press the PHONE button to begin UConnect system will use the priority three cellular For example you can say 234 567 8901 Call by Saying a Name e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say phone
288. or signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to an
289. otary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or un defined Hun Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Program Type ae o Program Type m Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College College Soft Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Oldies Oldies is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Personality Persnlty station with the same selected Music Type name The Public Public Music Type function only operates when in the FM Rhythm and Blues R amp B mode Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Talk Rel Talk Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Rock Rock exited and t
290. oulder belt on your chest so that it is button on the top of the mini buckle The belt will comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary will withdraw any slack in the belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully Insert the mini latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to automatically remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the perfor mance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC refer to information on Airbags in this section Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the
291. our chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked 030906204 Seat Height Adjustment 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Lumbar If Equipped The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard side of the driver s seat To increase or decrease support rotate the handle up or down 030906207 Lumbar Adjustment Driver s Seatback Recline To recline 1 Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position 030906206 Reclining Seat es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint To lower the head restraint depress the button and push down on the head restraint 030906203 Head Restraint Adjustment Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Af
292. outlet is directed toward the right rear passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward the left rear passenger Fan Control Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control from left OFF to right 81cab396 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the fan control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control etnias Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area 81caad41 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance indicates warmer temperatures mm 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Circulation Control Use this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode Only use the recirculate mode to tempo rarily block out any outside odors 81caad32 smoke or dust and to coo
293. ove the safety catch located under the front edge of the hood near the center and raise the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 8 in 20 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving 031306201 Safety Catch Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the right side left side facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and the fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Headlights Parking Lights and Instrument Panel Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Headlight Control 81913b27 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
294. ped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Illuminated Ap proach under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RK
295. ped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved approximately a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut th
296. pically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing en STARTING AND OPERATING 339 safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 lbs 907 kg Refer to the
297. r and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND awe SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate RES RSC Radio 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be
298. r in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard Va 55 SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPAN NEVER EXCEED XXX K FR ORIGINAL TIRES P195 70R14 T125 70D15 INFLATION PRES COLD TIF 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 420kPa 60PSI 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 305 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condit
299. r be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Operating Modes The ESP system has three available operating modes for 4WD equipped vehicles and two available operating modes for 2WD equipped vehicles 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Full On 4WD Models or On 2WD Models This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or ESP Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off AWD Models or On 2WD Models This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the ESP Indicator Light will be illuminated This mode is in tended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This
300. r cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 431 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is r
301. r overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 Th
302. r the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the automatic transaxle oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission overheat in dicator light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed If the high speed is maintained the overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 Jack Location Spare Tire Removal The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down in the cargo area Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING
303. r the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Proce dures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of th
304. rack Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Main Menu to switch to the main menu es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR hard key to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR hard key to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup 3 To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR hard key first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice comman
305. rb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle ee ST
306. re catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
307. re it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident then you should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determi
308. re the low glare surface ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft cloth 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FUSES Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Integrated Power Module IPM Fuse Fuse The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the 5 20 Amp Trailer Tow engine compartment near the air clean
309. recautions are not observed NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down switch is in the ON or ACC positions Always depress the while shifting out of PARK E pedal first before moving the shift lever out of 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE If a malfunction occurs the transaxle will not shift out of PARK Battery power is required to release the brake transmission interlock system There is a remov able plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you to insert your finger to override the system The ke
310. res H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle isse E Towing A Disabled Vehicle With Ignition Key sce ss cie eee Without The Ignition Key 362 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the Hazard Warning flasher switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an ssciasses emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e Incity traffic While stopped put the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn off the
311. riven through your Profile cellular phone 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellu lar phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone Jt for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone m
312. rk with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the side curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions However even in collisions where the airbags deploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you prop erly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck led up in the rear seat 2 Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 3 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly refer to information on Child Restraint in this section should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats 4 Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buck led up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arms 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehi
313. ront and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are ty
314. rted Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return
315. s except 2 4L PZEV Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace the accessory drive belt s LocoocoocoocoDoUOCLUOC Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary LI Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter E 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer PE l N T E N A N C E
316. s Rock College College Country Country Program Type idi uid Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Program Type 16 E o Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you
317. s determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 qt 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not ov
318. s feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in section 3 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Display English or Metric The EVIC odometer and navigation system units can be changed between English and Metric Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display
319. s in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPARe cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipp
320. s should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
321. sary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING Continued e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme after handling e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery
322. side curtain airbags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag The area where the side curtain for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizens band radios etc NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the side curtain airbags airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee impact bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side curtain airbags also wo
323. sing The Sunroof 144 Door Storage If Equipped 152 Pinch Protect Peatufe a cse das ex 144 W Console Features usse ERE HR 153 Pinch Protect Oyerrides site sece riitese 145 W Cargo Area Features iios oor ms 154 Venting Sunroof Express 145 Cargo Light Removable Self Recharging Sunshade Operation 6 145 a S a atte ae sett ne Wind Buffeting 00 0 0000 00 145 Capo M 2 saeeet ase ais Esse MIROR cce amie enc teens 146 Removable Load Floor 156 Ignition Off Operation lssss 146 ated TIED LOGBEL 0d see ait patel si 156 B Electrical Power Outlets 146 Bole Down opeakci M Beppe s rasia 197 Bl Power Inverter If Equipped 148 Bl Rear Window Features 157 E Copholders PCT 150 Bes VANNON PEE WASHES aajo niia aii tor ioo o MEN E 151 Rear WIL OON PERUSE uy cde oeansatedonatiet He ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 159 Glove Compartment And Storage Bin 151 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the win
324. situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may b
325. sive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary Failure to do so may result is serious injury 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ME POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged op
326. sized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heating Ventilation And Air Conditioning HVAC System The Manual Heating Ventilation And Air Conditioning HVAC System allows you to balance the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 The controls are as follows Mode Control Air Direction The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution as identified by the symbols 81caad23 Panel Climate Controls 79 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air R 134a a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer flow in the upper atmosphere Bi Level Js Air is directed through
327. speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner WARNING or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as sistance oe Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan HomeLink Buttons gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can rity Alarm is active cause serious injury or death
328. speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control switch ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Transaxle Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slip pery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight
329. ssure Moni toring Sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System a This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the d instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pre
330. ssure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information es STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or whe
331. stem will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands
332. such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the MIL flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 27 Hill Descent Indicator If Equipped The symbol illuminates is armed when the 2 4WD Lock switch is activated and the trans mission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position Off Road Mode UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 28 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are on 29 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Iraction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 30 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil ESP ity Program ESP is combined with Brake BAS Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warnin
333. such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section
334. symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers
335. t system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Ph
336. t any time the ignition switch is in the ON position Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 WARNING Continued e You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifre
337. tance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed with caution Allow engine and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do
338. tary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice
339. tays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 3 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 4 Oil Pressure Warning Light E This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the l
340. teady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s momentum Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the transaxle to low L Off Road if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momen tum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM s or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use low L Off Road with the 4WD LOCK engaged and maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Sand Soft sand is very difficult to trave
341. ten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system pro vides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing th
342. ter turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off ai If High level heating is selected the system automatically switches to Low level heating and turns one indicator light Off after 30 minutes of continuous operation It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation If Low level heating is selected the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light Off after 30 min utes of continuous operation Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut Off the heating elements NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
343. the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 3 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current values in the DTE calcula tion and the current fuel tank level Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Section 5 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS for system operation Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Set tings is displayed in the EVIC 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display
344. the driver The chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has returned to a stop Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is set To set the parking brake pull up firmly on the lever Also place the shift lever in the PARK position automatic transaxle or REVERSE position manual transaxle To release the parking brake apply the brake pedal pull up slightly on the lever then depress the button on the end of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the floor 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE The parking brake lever will not release unless As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill grade You should always apply the parking brake before leav ing the vehicle WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking before driving failure to do so can lead to brake brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise failure and an accident the load on the automatic transaxle locking
345. the next station for VR is different then the audio system e Frequency to change the frequency e Previous Station to select the previous station Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu In this mode you can say the following commands 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Track to change the t
346. the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Tf Y 022606150 Rear Seat Tether Anchors Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not
347. the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING 341 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 342 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Sched ule Refer to Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the G
348. the vehicle by the lap used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re portion straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or NOTE For additional information refer to E fatal injury to the infant www seatcheck org ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seatbelts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode
349. ther vehicle component as an attachment point Using tow straps requires coordination between the two drivers Good communication and line of sight are required for a safe recovery First connect the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles There should be a least 20 to 30 ft 6 to 9 m between the vehicles to allow 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se for a safe recovery If necessary join two tow straps together using a 1 1 2 in 4 cm hard wood dowel This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks Next have the tow vehicle backup leaving 2 to 3 ft 61 to 91 cm worth of slack in the strap Then the tow vehicle using light throttle should accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recovery at the time of the snap by slowly spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle After the vehicle becomes free the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle without using the brakes once signaled by the other driver This sequence is important to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle WARNING Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps with a clevis pin These heavy metal objects could become pro
350. ticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle
351. tion button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise ca
352. tion particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturers specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected for a prolonged period Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start a
353. tion key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other Radio Frequency RF electronics will not cause inter ference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ign
354. tions Auxiliary Mode Bl Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 0 223 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 225 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 228 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 228 lll Universal Consumer Interface UCI It Equipped nem RR 229 Connecting The iPod 230 Using This Feature 230 Controlling The iPod Using Radio b ttonsu a e 3v Ese a a a a 231 Play Mode sarsan iian as aean 231 List Or Browse Mode sss serseri ostaa 232 Wi Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU Radios Only 234 System Activation l l 235 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 235 Selecting Satellite Mode Satellite Antenna eee Reception Quality 00 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 236 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone lf Equipped ss exem ed xum er xen 239 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES IF Equipped ss RW RARE EIWR 239 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se ll Remote Sound System
355. to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with UConnect For sales code R
356. tomatic Door Locks If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming
357. traffic can add sudden upward loads the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the This is especially true on large flat loads and may roof place a blanket or some other protection result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the rated load capacity of your cross rail system or the roof rack system maximum load capacity of 150 lbs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Continued WARNING Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Wi Instrument Panel Features 165 E Instrument Cluster Premium 166 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 167 lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped ce eere Re RE 179 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 180 EVIC Functions e ecean eera e eaaa 181 Compass Temperature Audio 182 Av
358. u could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever toward you CANCEL normal braking or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is on speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired
359. uire service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash o
360. und in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the ignition has been turned OFF The sunroof operation will be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during the 45 second time period ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There is a standard 12 Volt power outlet located in the instrument panel for added convenience This outlet can power cell phones electronics and other low power devices Power Outlet 12 Volts 034606144 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure
361. ur vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s Size Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Infants And Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9kg but are
362. uspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary D U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs except 2 4L PZEV Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes DLL L 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Replace the air conditioning filter 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E
363. utine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance service
364. ution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say
365. vals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filtersfrom your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of this manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance interval WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is neces
366. ver drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning Airing Down For Off Road Driving Running lower tire pressure off road can improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly improving its surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form to the ground contour Different terrain tires and vehicles require different tire pressure Hard surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles You will need to experiment to determine what is right for your situation It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so start high and lower it as required Remem ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway conditions Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road air pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure drive at slower speeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Vehicle Recovery If you drive off road you may encounter a situation where you will need to recover your vehicle
367. w until snug DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door Manual Door Lock Plunger WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING Continued NOTE To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the key When leaving the vehicle always remove the key is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do will sound as a reminder to remove the key not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on the driver s door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate Driver Power Door Lock Switch 1 Unlock 2 Lock 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Au
368. way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint system The driver s airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 022606448 Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters 1 Driver and Passenger Airbag 2 Knee Boltser NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 022606195 Side Curtain Airbag Location 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment WARNING WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equipped with
369. wer Steering cse RERO ORO E 286 Power Steering Fluid Check 286 en STARTING AND OPERATING 253 B Parking Brake 0 0000 287 Tire Identification Number TIN 304 BM Duke Systeri euer seh eG ase REMRSS 289 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 305 Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Bl Tires General Information 309 BODES espen ifta iii ens an Tire Pressure 304 sac ease n RR EN GPS 309 H Electronic Brake Control System 292 Tire Inflation Pressures oe pseu ea cece cane Fate Tock Diae SEST abe ved quond dn Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Brake Assist System BAS 293 Radial Ply Ties Lesser Traction Control System TCS 294 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 294 Limited Use Spare If Equipped EHE Decent CORHQHAHIDX os EQUIDDSSL scc ides Tire Spinning 0 0 0000 eee eee 314 Electronic Stability Program ESP 296 Tread Wear Indicators ng x wo cers oe oe ct 315 H Tire Safety Information 300 Life Of Tie LLLA 315 IOCIS cae ae US Mei De 900 Replacement Tires llle 316 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ME
370. when you make a call You can select to use a VEI e Call lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section e The system will prompt you to say the name of the Dial by Saying a Number person you want to call Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ Dial ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the UConnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow
371. will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning light and the ABS light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS is required When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock mode e the ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e aslight drop or
372. wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisess
373. y To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 aa e Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the 022206147 vehicle Opening The Liftgate If you are required to drive with the liftgate open NOTE make sure that all windows are closed and the e In the event of a power malfunction or the RKE climate control blower switch is set at high speed transmitter is inoperative insert the key into the DO NOT use the recirculation mode liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right manual lock models only Using the liftgate handle pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear s
374. y brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter prolonged braking You could have an accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in NOTE Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the nate the brake fluid as seal damage will result brake fluid catching fire 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Transaxle CVT Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid which has been formulated with special metal to metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and result in a complete transmission failure Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked only by a trained technician Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the correct maintenance interval Special Additives Do not add any materials other than leak detection
375. y if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The
376. y must be in the ignition and in the ON position to use the override lever If this occurs obtain service as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position and the brake pedal is depressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range 051006184 Shift Lever PARK Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis sion The engine can be started in this range Never use en STARTING AND OPERATING 263 PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first and then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locke
377. you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See UConnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or UConnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the UConnect for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the UConnect

Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents